2017 Dodge Challenger SRT (Includes SRT 392/SRT Hellcat

2017 Challenger SRT/Hellcat
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
2017
17D492-126-AD
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Fourth Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
Challenger
SRT/Hellcat
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship,
distinctive styling, and high quality.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front
corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number
also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure
Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle
registration, and the title.
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 7
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located on
the right front strut tower inside the engine compartment.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Replacement Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Customer Key Fob Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ How To Use Remote Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Cancel Remote Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY . . . . .28
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .33
䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .73
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
includes a key fob and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
2
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In
this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the engine START/
STOP button and push to operate the ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fobs
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
trunk lid from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a handheld key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: SRT vehicles, equipped with the 6.2L Supercharged
engine, come with three key fobs (two red and one black)
that allow for different engine power levels. Please refer to
the Drive Modes Supplement for further descriptions.
Key Fob
The key fob also contains an emergency key, which stores
in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. The
emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the glove
compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you
when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the key fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the
chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display in
the cluster.
Emergency Key Release
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to ten minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs
from vehicle, and lock all doors.
(Continued)
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key fobs from vehicle, place the ignition in the OFF
position and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a Remote Keyless Entry key fob, a Keyless
Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that
are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to
crank if an invalid key fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds
if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilizer system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Replacement Key Fobs
Customer Key Fob Programming
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once an key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle key fobs with you to the authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
To Arm The System
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors and
trunk for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid release
are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle
security alarm will provide the following audible and
visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights will turn
on, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after approximately 29 seconds, turn off all of the visual signals after
five seconds, and then the system will rearm itself up to
eight times.
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, make sure the vehicles keyless ignition
system is OFF.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition system is
OFF, and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙
for further information).
• Advance the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed during power
trunk entry. Pushing the trunk button will not disarm
the vehicle security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle
through the trunk and opens any door, the alarm will
sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
vehicle security alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
to unlock the doors or open any door.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all key fob buttons
for all key fobs.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
The Remote Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or
unlock the doors, open the trunk, or activate the Panic
Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
Key Fob
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
To Lock The Doors
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the key fob. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the key fob. The time for
this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through
Uconnect. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are
locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or
turned off. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push the trunk button on the key fob two times within five
seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Using The Panic Alarm
Programming Additional Key Fobs
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the Panic button on the key fob for at least one second and
release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the turn signals
will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior
lights will turn on.
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a second time
or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or
greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm
is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will
remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the
system.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Separating Key Fob Case
Emergency Key Release
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
General Information
NOTE:
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may
reduce this range.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
• Ignition in OFF position (Keyless Enter-N-Go)
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster message stays active until the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
parking lights will flash, and horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present, the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the key fob. However, the ignition must be activated by
pushing the keyless ignition button twice (or the ignition
must be placed in the ON/RUN position) before you can
repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
• Any engine warning lights come on.
Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
• The hood is opened.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will
disable the one time push of the Remote Start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
• The gear selector is moved out of PARK.
• Low Fuel Light turns on.
• The hazard switch is pushed.
• The brake pedal is pushed.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
General Information
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock
the vehicle using Passive Entry via the door handles, and
disarm the vehicle security alarm (if equipped). Then, prior
to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
keyless ignition button.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
NOTE: In vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Ignition feature, the message “Remote Start Active - Push
Start Button” will display. This message will clear once the
START button is pushed.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Cancel Remote Start
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following occur:
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING!
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door
lock knob on each door trim panel upward.
Door Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the
door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs
from the vehicle and lock all doors, and lock your
vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is on, and either door is open, the power locks will not
operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the
key fob in the vehicle. Turning off the ignition or closing
the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open
with the ignition either cycled to ACC or RUN (engine not
running), a chime will sound as a reminder.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system. Refer to “Keyless
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in PARK.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. The driver door is opened.
NOTE:
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
• Passive Entry may be programmed on or off; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming — If
Equipped
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in
accordance with local laws.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
if equipped will arm the security alarm.
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices
may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
Passive Entry handle from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock both doors automatically. The interior
door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition is in the OFF position.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any passive entry vehicle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle
while a door is open.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
Passive Entry key fob inside the car, and it does not find
any Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, the car will
unlock and alert the customer.
To Enter The Trunk:
With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck
lid, push the button located on the center of the light bar
which is located on the deck lid above the license plate.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected outside the vehicle.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
following conditions are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle
and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door
handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry key fob in the trunk and try to close the deck lid, the
deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless another one of
the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs is outside the vehicle
and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push
the door handle lock button to lock both doors.
2
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
NOTE:
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
WINDOWS
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
Power Windows
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of
the door windows.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Power Window Switches
There is a single window control on the passenger’s door
trim panel that operates the window on the passenger’s
door. The window controls will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE:
Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped
• The Ignition Off Power Delay feature will allow the power
windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when either front
door is opened. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The driver’s door power window switch and passenger
door power window switch have an auto-down feature.
Push the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically.
• The door window will lower slightly if it is closed
completely when opening the door. The window will
return to its fully closed position after closing the door.
This action allows the door to open without resistance
and prevents window and seal damage.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
To open the window part way, push the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
The power window switches will remain active for up to
ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pushing the trunk release button. The button is located on
the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate. If equipped with a manual transmission, the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph (8 km/h)
before the button will operate.
Trunk Release
Button
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pushing the
trunk release button on the key fob
twice within five seconds or by using the external release switch located on the underside of the decklid overhang. The release feature
will function only when the vehicle
is in the unlock condition.
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the
trunk open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key
removed from the ignition switch, the trunk open symbol
will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the
trunk, young children may not be able to escape, even
if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the
trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Trunk Emergency Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark
handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Trunk Internal Emergency Release Lever
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in a vehicle
with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats. Older children who do not use child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “If You
Need Consumer Assistance” section for customer service contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer immediately and have it
fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
2
Positioning The Lap Belt
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Seat Belt Extender
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant,
it must be removed.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the risk
of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has
a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags
will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately. For additional information
regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to
the “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” section of this
manual.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the SABIC
and its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side
Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website
for
additional
information:
http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the
height or weight limit of their rearfacing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infant And Child Restraints
WARNING! (Continued)
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rearfacing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
(Continued)
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forwardfacing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt + Top
Anchors Only
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Tether Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This
Vehicle
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
+ weight of the child restraint) for using
the combined weight of the child and
the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use
the child restraint?
the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
the LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use
belt be used together to attach a rearthe LATCH anchorage system to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child refacing or forward-facing child restraint?
straint.
Booster seats may be attached to the
LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more
information.
Can two child restraints be attached usNo
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
ing a common lower LATCH anchorage?
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat
belt to install a child seat in the center
position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the
the back of the front passenger seat?
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See
your child restraint owner’s manual for
more information.
Can the head restraints be removed?
No
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the
rear of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating
position located in the panel between the rear
seatback and the rear window. They are found
under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage
symbol on it.
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the
seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do
not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt,
do not install a child seat in that outboard position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical installation instructions.
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rearfacing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
2
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child reusing the seat belt to install a forstraint) for using the Tether Anchor
ward facing child restraint, up to the
with the seat belt to attach a forward
recommended weight limit of the
facing child restraint?
child restraint.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front passenger
touch the back of the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is alseat?
lowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed?
No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retractighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
tor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating
position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether
strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the
section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should
not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Despite modern technology and World Class manufacturing methods, the moving parts of the vehicle must still
wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly
during the first 500 miles (805 km) and continues through
the first oil change interval.
It is recommended for the operator to observe the following driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in
period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an
extended period of time.
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than
halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum
performance and maximum durability for your new SRT
Vehicle.
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than
halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower gears (1st to
3rd gears).
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Avoid aggressive braking.
SAFETY TIPS
• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
Transporting Passengers
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
NOTE: Never transport passengers in the cargo area.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually at
higher rpms when possible.
• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelerator
pedal at wide open throttle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 miles (2414 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools,
or similar activities during the first 1500 miles (2414 km).
NOTE: Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher
through the first oil change interval. Running the engine
with an oil level below the add mark can cause severe
engine damage.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not
on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints Systems”
for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
your floor mat using the
• ALWAYS securely attach
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
before installing any other
FROM THE VEHICLE
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and reinstalled, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . .83
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .101
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . .102
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment . . . .102
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Manual Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
▫ Vanity Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Passenger Seat Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Rear Cross Path — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . .107
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
3
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . . . .110
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped .111
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .118
䡵 MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .120
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . .116
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . . .126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . .127
▫ Turning FCW On Or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ To Activate/Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Changing FCW Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Service FCW Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . . .131
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . . .134
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC. . . . . . . . .137
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . .140
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Operation . . .143
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .150
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .151
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
3
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .154
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . . . .155
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . . .159
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .162
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
3
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
through the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
• Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn the feature
on.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
SOS button.
• Press the mirror dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature off.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
SOS Call
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be
operable if your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for SiriusXM Guardian.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system
initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview
Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS operator
is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS
Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the SOS operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should be able
to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected with the SOS
operator until the SOS operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
3
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit
the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception
is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
(Continued)
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have your authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have your
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
• Operator error by the SOS operator.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
3
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
Outside Mirrors
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of
the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give
a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane
next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge. The
mirrors have one detent (clockwise) towards the rear of the
vehicle and three detent’s (counterclockwise) towards the
front of the vehicle.
3
Power Mirror Controls
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror that
you want to adjust.
Folding Mirrors
Power Mirrors
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use the
mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Close the mirror cover to turn off the light.
Vanity Mirrors
A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the
mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, pull the sun visor rearwards
until it is in the desired position. To use the extender
feature of the sun visor, grab the extender which is located
at the rear of the visor and pull rearward.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar
sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect
highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
Slide-On-Rod Extender
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
3
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE.
Manual Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
gear.
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a
forward gear.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer
to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
3
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Side Monitoring
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Rear
Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed of
less than 16 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 16 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
3
Stationary Objects
Overtaking/Passing
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cross Path — If Equipped
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and, if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal
before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alerts, including reducing the radio volume so that the alert can be
better heard.
WARNING!
RCP is not a back up aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the system
will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio volume is reduced so that the alert can
be better heard.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be reduced so
that the alert can be better heard.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced so that the alert can be better heard.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Power Seats
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the front seat cushions. The power seat switches are used
to control the position of the seat.
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
Power Seat Switch
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or
rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.
Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and
lower the position of the support.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
• Press the heated seat button
setting on.
once to turn the HI
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting on.
a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button
heating elements off.
a third time to turn the
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds: HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
the ventilated seat off.
a second time to
a third time to turn
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during
a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seat, near the
floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or
rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired
position. Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause
you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly
adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front Seatback Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard
side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Passenger Seat Easy Entry
On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever located on
the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatback and
slide the seat forward. You can also temporarily remove the
seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and allow the seat
belt to retract out of the way. This allows for easier access
to the rear seat. To return the seat to a normal seating
position, first return the seatback to its original recline
location and then slide the entire seat back to the pre-set
lock position.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision, you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Easy Entry Lever
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact, the RHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants head
and the RHR.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear
of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of your head.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not return to
their normal position, see your authorized dealer immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
To remove the head restraint, remove the seat belt from the
seat belt loop. Raise the head restraint as far as it can go.
Then, push the adjustment button and the release button at
the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into
the holes while pushing the adjustment button and release
button. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3 — Seat Belt Loop
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located at the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint.
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops located on the
upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or both
seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and, by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
Folded Rear Seat
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Folding Rear Seatback Loop
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING! (Continued)
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children when
the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously
injured in a collision. Children should be seated and
using the proper restraint system.
3
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of
the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, the safety catch is
located under the center front edge of the hood.
Hood Safety Catch
Hood Safety Catch Location
3. Push the safety catch to the left.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
3
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument
panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, and interior
lights.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO
position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
OFF position. The headlight time delay can be programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after
the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in
the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to on.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The “Headlights On With Wipers” feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
out of view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to
ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at
or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in
vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
system.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit
area with the headlight switch in the O (off) position.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when
the headlight switch is turned off.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the engine
is started and will remain on unless the headlamps are
turned to the on position, the parking brake is applied, or
the engine is shut OFF.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster display illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Fog Light Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Multifunction Lever
NOTE:
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instrument cluster display and a continuous chime will sound
if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three
times. Then, the turn signal (right or left) will automatically
turn off.
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to pass
position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams will shut
off.
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pushing the
lens. Push the lens a second time to turn off the light. These
lights also turn on when a door is opened, when the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry key fob is pushed, or
when the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the
second detent.
Overhead Console
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the
OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights were
switched on manually or are on because a door is open.
The Battery Protection also includes the glove compartment light and the trunk light. To restore interior light
operation after automatic battery protection is enabled
(lights off), either place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position or cycle the light switch.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
3
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Dome Light Position
Dimmer Controls
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the
instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
equipped).
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control
is in this position.
Interior Light Defeat (Off)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control downward to
the O (off) position. The interior lights will remain off when
the doors are open.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the
first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as
the odometer, instrument cluster display, and radio when
the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction
lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent settings
for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through
an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield
wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any
position other than off.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make
a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles
desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the
first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to
select the desired delay interval. There are four delay
settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval
from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum
of approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST position
to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate
until you release the multifunction lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
several wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever
and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles
and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if
the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: For vehicle equipped with rain sensor (auto
wipes), please note that in addition to the 10 seconds, the
headlights can also turn on if the Rain Sensing feature is on,
and the front wipers complete a minimum of five wipe
cycles within 60 seconds.
In this case (auto wipes), the headlights will turn off if no
wipes occurs in 240 Seconds.
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is
especially useful for road splash or overspray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this
feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive, and
wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should
be used for normal rain conditions. Settings 1 and 2 can be
used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be
used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper
switch in the off position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when
ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL
position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until
the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the
NEUTRAL position.
NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the
steering column.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an
average of 80 minutes or more before automatically shutting off. This time will vary based on environmental
temperatures. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
the heating element on.
once to turn
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
• Press the heated steering wheel button
to turn the heating element off.
a second time
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
speed control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control.
“CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear on the instrument cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is on. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time.
“CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear on the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (–) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate
at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message,
“CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”, will appear
indicating what speed was set. A cruise indicator lamp,
along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the
instrument cluster display when the speed is set.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button or
normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition to the
OFF position erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
touchscreen radio settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
touchscreen radio settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
Control function performs differently. Please refer to the
proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to
reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor
designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC
will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
this section.
NOTE: The normal (fixed speed) cruise control will not
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse
sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when
driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered,
slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
(Continued)
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The cruise control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — Distance Setting Increase
6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) On/Off
7 — Distance Setting Decrease
8 — CANC/Cancel
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When the brakes are overheated.
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
• Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
The system will cancel when the vehicle speed drops below
15 mph (24 km/h).
• When the ESC is in Full-Off mode.
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the “ready” state, the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument
cluster display will show the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be the current speed of the
vehicle.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not,
the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will show in the
instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed
will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC (cancel) button is pushed.
• The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
To Resume
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES (resume)
button. Then, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The instrument cluster display will show the last set speed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
• Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory
if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that
is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
touchscreen radio settings if equipped. Refer to “ Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting will show in the instrument cluster display.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to 15 mph
(24 km/h) when following a target vehicle.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the instrument cluster display will show the “Sensed
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the
ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display is located
in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
Brake Alert
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action and does
not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
Display Warnings And Maintenance
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read “ACC
SET.”
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information, refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every
trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended.
Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW
operation.
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor
lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the
sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
NOTE:
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be
an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later,
following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your
authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly.
The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
3
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of
the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turns And Bends
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve, the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
NOTE: On tight turns, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example
Turn Or Bend Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Lane Changing
Narrow Vehicles
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have
moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Lane Changing Example
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising
at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without
requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control can only be operated if the
vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
To change between the different control modes, push the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.
Pushing of the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will not
react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set, a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”
will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will
turn on when the cruise control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Decrease Speed
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Turn Off
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings.
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory
if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) — IF
EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides
the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within
the instrument cluster display), to warn the driver when it
detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings are
intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Turning FCW On Or Off
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph
(10 km/h).
NOTE: The default status of FCW is on; this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
The Forward Collision activation/deactivation is located in
⬙Uconnect Settings⬙ under ⬙Safety and Driving Assistance⬙.
Forward Collision can be checked or unchecked.
When FCW is selected off, there will be an ⬙FCW OFF⬙ icon
that appears in the instrument cluster display.
Changing the FCW status to off prevents the system from
warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you.
NOTE:
• The FCW system’s default state is on. If the system is
turned off followed by the ignition being turned to OFF,
the FCW system will reset to on when the vehicle’s
engine is restarted.
• FCW system is temporarily turned off when ESC FullOff Mode is active.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Changing FCW Status
NOTE:
The FCW Sensitivity Settings are programmable through
the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• The system will NOT retain the last setting selected by
the driver after ignition shut down. The system will reset
to “Medium” with Active Braking “On” when the
vehicle’s engine is restarted.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting in the “On”
setting. This allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using an audible
and visual warning when the other vehicle is at a farther
distance than the “Medium” setting and will apply active
braking.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you when you are much closer. This setting
provides less reaction time than the “Medium” and “Far”
setting, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper,
monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’
field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the
location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, and an obstacle has been
detected, the warning display will turn on indicating the
system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast to
continuous.
3
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
Arc — Left
Rear
Arc — Center Rear
Arc — Right
Rear
Radio Volume Reduced
Greater
than
79 inches
(200 cm)
None
79-59 inches
(200-150
cm)
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 inches 47-39 inches
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
Fast
Continuous
None
Single 1/2Second
Tone
(for rear
center only)
None
None
None
None
1st Flashing
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
None
None
None
None
3rd Flashing
None
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Yes
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Yes
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
cluster display will feature the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or defective. The ParkSense switch LED will be off
when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed and the system is disabled or requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily and then the
LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
ParkSense Switch
When the ParkSense system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately
five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message for five seconds. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense
will not operate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure the
outer surface and the inside of the rear fascia/bumper is
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction,
and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense or render the system temporarily unavailable.
• When you turn ParkSense off in DRIVE, the instrument
cluster will display ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙ for five seconds.
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio when it is
sounding an audio tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
can result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the
fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense system is off if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 12
inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as
a sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be shown in the
instrument cluster display.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver
looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds,
this note will disappear.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature
and it is turned on, the rear camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE. However, this feature is canceled if the forward
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into PARK or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the
OFF position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera
Delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
last touchscreen appears again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. The
active guide lines will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Push the lens to turn on the light. Push it a second time to
turn off the light.
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink) button and a power sunroof switch may also
be included, if equipped.
At the forward end of the overhead console are two
courtesy/reading lights.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when the
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry key fob is
pushed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully
upward past the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
Overhead Console
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that
operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting, or home security systems. The HomeLink
unit is powered by your vehicle’s battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead
console designate the three different HomeLink channels.
The HomeLink indicator is located on the left side of the
first button.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
HomeLink Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995:
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the
button that is normally used to open and close the door. The
name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step two and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step two and follow all
remaining steps.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission,
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while
you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING! (Continued)
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
(Continued)
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically
and stop when the full open position is reached. This is
called “Express Open.” During Express Open operation,
any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
Pinch Protect Feature
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will move rearward and automatically stop at
full open position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and release to Express
Close.
Closing Sunroof — Express
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close.” During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch forward.
The sunroof will move forward and automatically stop at
full closed position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the front
windows closed, open the front windows together to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” can be powered when
the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets
labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to the
battery and powered at all times.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
These power outlets can also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit.
NOTE:
• The front integrated center stack power outlet can be
changed from switched “ignition” to constant “battery”
powered all the time by moving the integrated center
stack fuse #12 in the Rear Power Distribution Center
from fuse location “IGN” to “B+.” Refer to “Fuses” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
• To ensure proper operation, a Mopar cigar knob and
element must be used.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
The front power outlet is located next to the storage area on
the integrated center stack of the instrument panel.
3
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Power Outlet — Center Console
Power Outlet — Integrated Center Stack Front
NOTE: All accessories connected to these powered outlets
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in
use to protect the battery against discharge.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Integrated Center Stack
2 — #38 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
(Continued)
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center console and
in the door panels.
Front Cupholders
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining
a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
Door Cupholder
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are place in the cupholder,
they can spill when the door is closed, burning the
occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to avoid
injury.
Rear Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
3
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Opened Glove Compartment
Glove Compartment
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Console Storage
The center console has a storage compartment located
underneath the armrest. The compartment contains a 12
Volt power outlet, and a molded-in coin holder (designed
to hold various size coins). The center console may also be
equipped with an IPOD/USB/MP3 Control. This supports
Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and iPhone devices. Refer
to “IPOD/USB/MP3 Control – If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Center Console
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
touchscreen or climate controls switch bank. Push
this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the
button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
approximately ten minutes. For an additional five minutes
of operation, push the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . .176
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . .178
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . .180
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu
Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
▫ Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
䡵 CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .220
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
䡵 SRT PERFORMANCE PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
4
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Timers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Gauges 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Gauges 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ G-Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
䡵 SRT DRIVE MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Track Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Default Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Custom Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
䡵 RACE OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ Launch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . . .270
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .271
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Automatic Climate Control Overview . . . . . . . .273
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
䡵 VALET MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
䡵 ECO MODE — IF EQUIPPED WITH AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .269
▫ Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
▫ Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Mobile App (8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4 NAV). . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Apple CarPlay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Navigation (8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Android Auto — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ SiriusXM Guardian (8.4 NAV) — If Equipped . . .290
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Register (8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Vehicle Health Report/Alert (8.4 NAV). . . . . . . .291
4
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
Instrument Panel
1
2
3
4
— Air Outlets
— Instrument Cluster
— Glove Compartment
— Media Center
5 — Keyless Start/Stop Button
6 — Trunk Release Button
7 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT
4
Instrument Cluster For SRT 6.4L — Base
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster For SRT 6.2L Supercharged — Premium
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
•
vehicle where the fuel filler door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
4
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instrument
panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained
in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints Systems” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
4
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS pump will
run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or
a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate,
have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are
also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position.
CAUTION!
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
WARNING!
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
4
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a
set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4 minutes, or until
the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
4
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase
the engine speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
WARNING!
CAUTION!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
4
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Electric Power Steering).
Refer to “Electric Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trunk Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Speed Limit Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Speed Limit Warning Light
If the vehicle speed is greater than or equal to 75 mph (120 km/h), the Speed Warning telltale
will display in the instrument cluster display, and a chime will sound with a pop up warning
message.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical
driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
4
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If
the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned
off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
4
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
4
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a chime will
sound. The light will remain on until fuel is added.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Adaptive Cruise Control Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control Fault Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information,
refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on when there is a fault in the Forward Collision Warning system. Contact
your authorized dealer.
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.
4
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and steering torque warnings when the
vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
from solid green to solid yellow.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green to flashing yellow.
Refer to “LaneSense - If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service. Please see
your authorized dealer.
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning properly and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
ECO Mode Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
ECO Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when ECO Mode is active.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal
as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been set to a certain speed.
4
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and the target vehicle is
detected. Refer to ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped⬙ in ⬙Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle⬙ for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Light
This will display the distance setting for the ACC system when the system is engaged. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam.
4
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
White Telltale Indicator Lights
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when only the left or
right lane marking has been detected. When both lanes are detected the telltale will light up
green, and the system will be ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display
if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control is on, but not set.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned on. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control ” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active. Refer to “Sport Mode — Without Performance
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Track Mode Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Track Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Track Mode is active. Refer to “Drive Modes” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
4
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Custom Mode Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Custom Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Custom Mode is active. Refer to “Drive Modes” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Valet Mode Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Valet Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Valet Mode is active. Refer to “Drive Modes” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
Set Speed Warning Light — If Equipped
White Warning
Light
What It Means
Set Speed Warning Light
When Set Speed Warning is turned on the speed warning telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster, with a number matching the set speed. When the set speed is exceeded, a single
chime will sound along with pop up message of speed warning exceeded. When the set speed is
exceeded by 2 mph (3 km/h) or more, the indication will light up yellow and flash along with a
continuous chime (up to 10 seconds or until the speed is no longer exceeded). Speed Warning can
be turned on and off in the instrument cluster display, for further information refer to “Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
NOTE: The number “120” is only an example of a speed that can be set.
4
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
The instrument cluster display features an interactive
display which is located in the instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pushing the arrow buttons
located on the left side of the steering wheel. The instrument cluster display menu items consist of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Performance — If Equipped
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
• Messages
Instrument Cluster Display
• Screen Setup
• Speed Warning — If Equipped
• Diagnostics — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the left or right arrow button allows you to cycle
through the submenu items of the Main menu item.
NOTE:
• Holding the up/down or left/right arrow button will
loop the user through the currently selected menu or
options presented on the screen.
• Main menu and submenu’s wrap for continuous scrolling.
• Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu
screen viewed within that main menu will be displayed.
OK Button:
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
1 — Up Arrow Button
2 — OK Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — Left Arrow Button
For Digital Speedometer:
• Pushing the OK button changes units (mph or km/h).
For Screen Setup:
• OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus.
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the up or down arrows allows you to cycle through
the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title area.
• Within each submenu layer, the up and down arrows
will allow the user to select the item of interest.
4
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to
the 1st page of the submenu).
or arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
• Pushing the left arrow button will exit each submenu
layer and return to the main menu.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new Performance Timers):
• Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK
button.
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine
oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls
for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right or left arrow button to go
through the “Vehicle Info” submenus and access the
”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display will
update to show 100%. If conditions are not met, a popup
message of ⬙To reset oil life engine must be off with
ignition in run⬙ will be displayed (for five seconds), and
the user will remain at the Oil Life screen.
5. Push and release the up or down arrow button to exit
the submenu screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls
for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right or left arrow button to access
the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display will
update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a popup
message of ⬙To reset oil life engine must be off with
ignition in run⬙ will be displayed (for five seconds), and
the user will remain at the Oil Life screen.
5. Push and release the up or down arrow button to exit
the submenu screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
4
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Cruise Control
Push the cruise control button located on the steering
wheel to activate cruise control.
This area will show reconfigurable white telltales. These
telltales include:
• Cruise Control Ready
This telltale will illuminate white to indicate that
the Cruise Control system is activated.
• Cruise Control Set
This telltale will illuminate green when the electronic speed control is set. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Speedometer menu is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the OK button to toggle units
(km/h or MPH) of the digital speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
“Vehicle Info” menu is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the right or left arrow button to
scroll through the submenus items of “Vehicle Info.” Follow the directional prompts to access or reset any of the
following “Vehicle Info” submenu items:
• Tire Pressure Monitor
• Coolant Temp
• Trans Temp
• Oil Temp
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
• Oil Pressure
WARNING! (Continued)
• Oil Life
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
• Battery Voltage
• Air Intake Temp
• Air-Fuel Ratio — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Performance menu is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Push the right or left arrow button to enter the
submenus.
• Boost Pressure — If Equipped
The Performance Features include the following:
• Intercooler (I/C) Temp — If Equipped
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• Engine Torque
• Engine Power
Performance Features — If Equipped
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the limits
of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured
by the performance pages must never be exploited in a
(Continued)
• 0-100 MPH (0-161 km/h) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
4
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• 1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• 1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• Braking Distance
– Distance
– From Speed
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the
following displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
• Current G-Forces
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• Peak G-Forces
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
• Lap Timer
• Lap History
– Will list the last 5 laps with the best lap highlighted in
green.
• Top Speed
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the instrument
cluster display:
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
ACC SET
Fuel Economy
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
Two submenu pages one with Current Value (instantaneous calculation of the fuel economy) displayed and one
without the Current Value displayed (toggle the left or
right arrow button to select one):
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
• Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l).
• Range To Empty (miles or km).
• Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l).
• The Max and Min values will correspond to the particular engine requirements.
• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber color
and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
• Hold the OK button to reset average fuel economy
information.
4
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Info
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip Menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip
A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the following:
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Screen Setup Menu displays in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the OK button to enter the
submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location that information is displayed.
• Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
• Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100km or km/l) of Trip A or Trip B
since the last reset.
• Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since the last reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
This feature shows the audio information.
Stored Messages
This feature shows the number of stored warning messages, if any. Pushing the right or left arrow button will
allow you to scroll through the stored messages.
1. Upper Left
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty (default)
• Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
2. Upper Right
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default)
• Time
• Range to Empty
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
• Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
3. Center
• Menu Title (default)
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Audio Information
• Digital Speed
• None
4. Current Gear
• On
• Off (default)
5. Odometer
• Show (default)
• Hide
6. Gear Display
• Full (default)
• Single
7. Restore Default
• Ok
• Cancel
Speed Warning — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Speed Warning Menu icon/title is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release OK to enter speed
warning. Use up or down arrow button to select a desired
speed, then push and release OK to set the speed. The
Manual Speed Assist (MSA) Speed Warning telltale will
display in the instrument cluster display, and a chime will
sound with a pop up warning message when the set speed
is exceeded.
4
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Diagnostics — If Equipped
Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to view engine and emission
vehicle faults.
• There is a delay when the next diagnostic code is
requested during which the following message is displayed:
• “Checking System for Diagnostic Codes.”
The Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) is enabled on vehicles with manual transmission, or when a vehicle with
automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The PSI
provides the driver with a visual indication within the
instrument cluster display when the driver configured gear
shift point has been reached and the driver is still accelerating. This indication notifies the driver to change gear
corresponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit.
• Driver must push the OK button again to see the next
Pcode otherwise current message remains displayed.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
• Push OK to have the most recent fault code sent.
• Driver exits when they cycle to another submenu (up or
down).
• Faults are displayed from newest to the oldest.
• If the menu is exited before the end of codes is reached
- when the driver re-enters the list will be restarted from
the beginning.
• When no codes are present or the last code is reached =
(P0000) and this message is displayed:
• “No or End of Diagnostic Codes.”
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running. It
will display a message if there is a risk of battery depletion to
the point where the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical
supply, or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be affected by load
reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
4
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game
consoles and similar devices.
• The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the
evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
CYBERSECURITY
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Data Collection & Privacy” in “Uconnect + SiriusXM Guardian” in your
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement and “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
4
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect 8.4 radio,
refer to the following images for the correct Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
For Canadian residents with the below radio configuration,
please refer to the Uconnect 8.4 Owner’s Manual Supplement.
For the below radio configuration, please refer to the
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Refer to the Uconnect 8.4 Owner’s Manual Supplement
Refer to the Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Owner’s Manual
Supplement
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
UCONNECT SETTINGS
Buttons On The Faceplate
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access
and change the customer programmable features.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a setting
(i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have a power and back
buttons on the faceplate.
Push the power button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect screen. Push the power button on the faceplate a
second time to turn the screen on.
Push the back button on the faceplate to exit out of a menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Buttons On Touchscreen And
Buttons On Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
display.
4
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 8.4
Settings
Press the “Apps
” button (If Equipped), and then
press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
Uconnect system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as Language, Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance,
Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off
Options, Audio, Phone, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
Display
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may
vary.
Setting Name
Display Mode
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
up or down arrow button on the right side of the screen
will allow you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Selectable Options
Manual
+
Auto
–
NOTE:
• When in the “Display Brightness With Headlights ON” display, you may select the brightness with the headlights
on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
Setting Name
Selectable Options
• To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With
+
–
Headlights OFF
NOTE:
• When in the “Display Brightness With Headlights OFF” display, you may select the brightness with the headlights
off. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
• To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Theme
NOTE:
When in the “Set Theme” display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the
⬙Set Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
AutoShow Smartphone Display Upon
Connection
Touchscreen Beep
4
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controls Screen
Time-Out — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time Out” feature is selected, the controls screen will stay open for five seconds before the
screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Turn-ByTurn Displayed In
Cluster — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the instrument cluster display, and navigation system (if
equipped). The following selectable units of measure are
listed below:
Setting Name
Units
Speed
Distance
Fuel Consumption
Pressure
Power — If
Equipped
Temperature
Torque — If
Equipped
4
Selectable Options
Metric
US
MPH
mi
MPG (US)
psi
MPG (UK)
kPa
HP (US)
°C
lb-ft
Custom
km/h
km
L/100 km
km/L
bar
HP (UK)
kW
°F
Nm
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
Selectable Options
Brief
Never
Detailed
With Help
Always
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Sync Time With GPS — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE:
The “Sync Time With GPS” feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time.
Set Time Hours
+
–
Set Time Minutes
+
–
Time Format
12 hrs
24 hrs
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
Setting Name
Show Time In Status Bar — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE:
The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
Selectable Options
Near
Far
NOTE:
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an audible and/or visual warning to potential forward collisions. The feature can be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you
the most reaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This warns you of a
possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you.
4
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
ParkSense — If Equipped
Sound Only
Selectable Options
Sound And Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle
speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other
objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display.
Rear ParkSense Volume —
Low
Med
High
If Equipped
NOTE: The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected from the instrument cluster display or Uconnect System. The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
Blind Spot Alert — If
Off
Lights
Lights & Chime
Equipped
NOTE:
• When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When
“Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors
as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
• If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
Setting Name
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay
Selectable Options
NOTE: When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited
and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned on), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to ten seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into “PARK” or
the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the “Controls” button
on the touchscreen, the “settings” button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the
touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup Camera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView Delay ON
or OFF.
Active ParkView Backup
Camera Guidelines
NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to
see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
Rain Sensing Auto Wiper
NOTE:
When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it
senses moisture on the windshield.
4
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
Headlight Illumination On Approach
Headlights With
Wipers — If
Equipped
Auto Dim High
Beams — If
Equipped
Daytime Running
Lights — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
0
0
30
30
60
60
90
90
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
Setting Name
Steering Directed
Lights — If
Equipped
Flash Lights With
Lock
Selectable Options
4
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Unlock On Exit
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlocks On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob, or when using the passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without the
“Sound Horn on Lock” feature selected.
Sound Horn With Lock
Off
1st Press
2nd Press
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sound Horn With Remote
Start
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Driver Door
All Doors
NOTE:
• When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s
doors. When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
key fob unlock button.
• If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which
Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door
opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be
used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
Personal Settings Linked
To Key Fob — If
Equipped
NOTE:
• This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors,
steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
• The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob is set to on) when the
key fob is used to unlock the door.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
— If Equipped
Off
Selectable Options
Remote Start
All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Easy Exit Seat — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is
shut off.
Engine Off Power
0 seconds
45 seconds
5 minutes
10 minutes
Delay
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval,
and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes.”
Headlight Off Delay
0
30
60
90
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60,
or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the
touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Balance/Fade
“Speaker” Icon
Selectable Options
Arrow Buttons
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use
the arrows to adjust, or tap the “Speaker” icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer
+
–
NOTE:
• The “Equalizer” feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+”
and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons
on the touchscreen.
• Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly
on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted VolOff
1
2
3
ume
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed
Adjusted Volume press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Surround Sound —
If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
AUX Volume Offset
-3
+3
— If Equipped
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input. To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match button on the touchscreen, choose a level from
–3 to +3.
Auto Play
On
Off
NOTE:
The Auto Play feature allows a media device to begin playing when the media device is plugged in. To make your
selection, press the On or Off buttons to activate or deactivate Auto Play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Phone Settings
After pressing the “Phone Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Do Not Disturb
Selectable Options
List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto
Reply Message (custom, default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones and Audio Sources
List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Sources” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and
Audio Sources Settings system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Tune Start
Selectable Options
Channel Skip
Name of Channel
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on
the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information
Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Ok
Selectable Options
Cancel
X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default
setting, press the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen. A pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want
to reset your settings to default?”
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
OK
Selectable Options
Cancel
X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want
to clear all personal data?”
4
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
System Information
Selectable Options
System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying
the system software version. You can also update your maps with a USB device. Please see your authorized dealer for
further information.
SRT PERFORMANCE PAGES
Performance Pages is an application that provides a display for performance indicators, as received from the
instrument cluster, that will help you gain familiarity with
the capabilities of your SRT vehicle in real-time.
To access the SRT Performance Pages, press the “Apps”
button on the touchscreen, then press the “SRT Performance” button on the touchscreen, or press “SRT Pages” in
the top left of the touchscreen while in Drive Modes. Press
the desired button on the touchscreen to access that specific
Performance Page.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the SRT Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the limits
of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured
by the Performance Pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
The Performance Pages include the following:
The following describes each feature and its operation:
• Home
Home
• Timers
• Gauges 1
• Gauges 2
4
• G-Force
• Engine
SRT Performance Pages — Home
When Home is selected, the following features will be
available:
• A series of six images which can be selected by the user.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll through
vehicle images.
When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to select
from following “Tickets”:
• A short-cut to the SRT Drive Modes feature.
• Current
Timers
Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time” summary of the performance timers.
• Last
Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run of
performance timers.
• Best
Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run
of performance timers, except for braking data.
SRT Performance Pages — Timers
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
• Save
Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the current,
last or best page currently being viewed. Any saved run
over ten, will overwrite the oldest saved run for Uconnect
System storage. The operation of the Save feature is listed
below:
• Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the
Owner web page.
• Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer “Ticket.”
The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:
• Reaction Time
Measures the driver’s reaction time for launching the
vehicle against a simulated drag strip timing light (behavior modeled after 500 Sportsman Tree) displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• Positive values closest to zero are best, negative values
mean you have faulted the start and the value won’t be
used for best times.
• The Reaction Time, MPH, ⅛, and ¼ Mile timers will be
“ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h).
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
SRT Performance Pages — “Save”
• With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB” button
to save runs to the jump drive.
• 0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
100 mph (0 to 160 km/h).
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ mile
(200 meters).
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter) Trap Speed
Displays velocity or speed of the vehicle at the end of an
⅛ mile (200 meters).
NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers will only display
⬙ready⬙ when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30 MPH
(48 km/h).
Gauges 1
• ¼ Mile (400 meter)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile
(400 meters).
• ¼ Mile (400 meter) Trap Speed
Displays velocity or speed of the vehicle at the end of an
¼ mile (400 meters).
• Brake Distance
Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full
stop. Contains current and last data for distance and start
– from speed.
NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
• Brake From MPH
Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the brake
pedal is pressed.
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1
(6.2L Manual Transmission)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage.
• Trans Oil Temp (Auto Transmission Only)
Shows the actual automatic transmission oil temperature.
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1
(6.2L Automatic Transmission)
When selected, this screen displays the following values
for the 6.2L:
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1 (6.4L)
4
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When selected, this screen displays the following values
for the 6.4L:
Gauges 2
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (6.4L Manual
Transmission)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
• Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmission
Only)
Shows the actual transmission temperature.
4
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (6.4L Automatic
Transmission)
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Battery Voltage
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (6.2L)
Shows the actual battery voltage.
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Intake Air Temperature
• Boost Pressure
Shows the actual intake air temperature.
Shows the current value for boost pressure.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Air Fuel Ratio
G-Force
Shows the current value for the air fuel ratio.
• Inter-Cooler (I/C) Coolant Temperature
Shows the current value for the I/C coolant temperature.
• Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual intake air temperature.
SRT Performance Pages — G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force values
(two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as steering angle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
When G-Force is selected, the following features will be
available:
• Lateral G-Force Left and Right
The lateral g-force measures the (sideways) left and right
force of the vehicle.
• Longitudinal G-Force Fore and Aft
The longitudinal g-force measures the acceleration and
braking force of the vehicle.
• Peak G-Forces Fore Aft, Left and Right
This shows the maximum g-forces that have been achieved
since the last reset from the instrument cluster display.
Peak values are maintained through ignition cycles by the
instrument cluster display until they are cleared by the
driver.
• Vehicle Speed
Vehicle Speed measures the current speed of the vehicle in
either mph or km/h, starting at zero with no maximum
value.
• Steering Wheel Angle
Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to
measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to zero.
The zero degree measurement indicates a steering wheel
straight ahead position. When the steering angle value is
negative, this indicates a turn to the left, and when the
steering angle value is positive, a turn to the right.
When a force greater than zero is measured, the display
will update the value as it climbs. As the G-Force falls, the
peak forces will continue to display.
4
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine
SRT Performance Pages — Engine
(6.2L Automatic Transmission)
SRT Performance Pages — Engine
(6.4L Automatic Transmission)
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Vehicle Speed
Shows the actual vehicle speed.
• Instantaneous Horsepower/Kilowatts
Shows the instantaneous horsepower.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
• Instantaneous Torque
SRT DRIVE MODES
Shows the instantaneous torque.
Key Fob 6.2L Supercharged Engine — If Equipped
• Oil Pressure (6.4L Only)
Shows the actual oil pressure.
• Gear (Automatic Transmission Only)
4
Shows the current (or pending) operating gear of the
vehicle.
• Boost Pressure (6.2L Only)
Shows the actual boost pressure.
Red Key Fob
If your vehicle is equipped with the 6.2L supercharged
engine, it will support an additional engine power level
configuration as part of SRT Drive Modes. Use of the red
key fob unlocks the full potential of the engine’s output,
and allows the driver to select from two power levels
within Drive Modes Set-Up.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Drive Modes
Black Key Fob
Use of the black key fob limits the driver to a reduced
engine output. This information is also available within the
SRT Drive Modes interface, and can be accessed by pressing the “KEY FOB” button on the touchscreen in the SRT
Drive Modes menu.
Drive Modes
Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a Drive Modes feature
which allows for coordinating the operation of various
vehicle systems depending upon the type of driving behavior desired. The Drive Modes feature is controlled through
the Uconnect radio and may be accessed by performing any
of the following:
• Pushing the SRT button on the instrument panel switch
bank.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
• Selecting “Drive Modes” from the “Apps” menu.
• Selecting “Drive Modes” from within the Performance
Pages menu.
Engine/
Transmission
6.2L Auto
6.2L Manual
6.4L Auto
6.4L Manual
NOTE: Not all options listed in this manual are available
on every vehicle. Refer to the chart below for all available
Drive Mode vehicle configurations.
Red Key/
700+ HP
Black Key/
500 HP
Transmission
Paddle
Shifters
Suspension
Steering
Traction
X
X
N/A
N/A
X
X
N/A
N/A
X
N/A
X
N/A
X
N/A
X
N/A
X
X
X
X
N/A
N/A
X
X
X
X
X
X
The SRT Drive Modes main screen displays the current
drive mode and real-time status of the vehicle’s performance configuration. The selectable Drive Modes buttons
are Track, Sport, Custom, or Default and will be highlighted when displaying the current configuration. Information shown below each drive mode button will indicate
the actual status of each system, along with a graphic that
displays the status of the vehicle’s components. The color
red indicates “Track,” orange “Sport,” and yellow “Street.”
If the system status shown does not match the current
drive mode set up, a message will be displayed indicating
which values are not matching the current mode and why.
NOTE:
• ESC Full-Off can be activated across all of the Drive
Mode features by pushing and holding the ESC Off
button on the instrument panel switch bank for five
seconds. The vehicle must be under five mph.
• If equipped with a manual transmission, the 1 - 4 Skip
Shift feature is disabled in TRACK, SPORT, and CUSTOM Drive Modes
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Listed below are the available Drive Modes:
Sport Mode
Track Mode
Drive Modes (Sport)
Drive Modes (Track)
Pressing the “Track” button on the touchscreen will activate the configuration for typical track driving. The Transmission, Traction, Steering, and Suspension systems are all
set to their “Track” settings highlighted in red. The Paddle
Shifters are enabled.
Pressing the “Sport” button on the touchscreen will activate the configuration for typical enthusiast driving. The
Traction, Transmission, Steering, and Suspension systems
are all set to their “Sport” settings highlighted in orange.
The Paddle Shifters are enabled.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
NOTE: If Valet Mode is active, the vehicle will start in Valet
Mode, not Default Mode.
Default Mode
Custom Mode
4
Default Mode
This mode is for typical driving conditions where the
Traction and Transmission will be operating in their Street
settings, which cannot be changed while in this mode. The
Steering and Suspension can be configured in either the
“Street,” “Sport,” or “Track” modes and the Paddle Shifters
may be enabled or disabled while in this mode.
Custom Mode
The Custom Mode may be selected quickly by pushing the
SRT button on the instrument panel switch bank two times,
or pressing the “Custom” button on the touchscreen.
Custom Mode allows you to create a custom configuration
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
that is saved for quick selection of your favorite settings.
While in Custom Mode, the Power, Traction, Transmission,
Steering, Suspension, and Paddle Shifter settings are
shown in their current configuration.
current configuration will be displayed. Select which mode
suits your driving needs for a custom driving experience.
Drive Mode Set-Up Info
Within the Drive Mode Set-Up screen, press the left / right
arrows to scroll through all the available Drive Mode
systems giving you a description of their operation and
current configuration. The last page is a description of the
Mode you are currently in.
Custom Mode Set-Up — 6.2L Example
While in the Custom Drive Mode screen, press the “Custom
Set-Up” button on the touchscreen to access the selectable
options. In the Custom Mode Set-Up screen, the individual
Track Mode Info
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
Power — If Equipped With 6.2L Supercharged
Engine
• 700+
Press the “700+” button on the touchscreen to modify the
output power of the engine to 700+.
NOTE: This selection is only available with the red key fob.
• 500
Press the “500” button on the touchscreen to modify the
output power of the engine to 500.
NOTE: This selection is available with the red or black key
fob and will limit the transmission to the ⬙Street⬙ setting.
Eco and Valet modes are still available while 500 mode is
selected.
Power — 6.2L Supercharged Engine Only
4
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Track
Transmission
Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to provide the
fastest shift speeds and will have the highest comfort
trade-off.
• Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide
faster shift speeds and will have a moderate comfort
trade-off.
• Street
Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide a
balance of shift speed and comfort for typical daily driving.
Transmission
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
Paddle Shifters – If Equipped With Automatic
Transmission
• On
Press the “On” button on the touchscreen to enable steering wheel paddle shifters.
• Off
Press the “Off” button on the touchscreen to disable
steering wheel paddle shifters.
Paddle Shifters
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Track
Traction
Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to modify
traction control to optimize track performance with the
least stability control.
• Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to turn off
traction control and reduce stability control.
• Street
Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide full
traction control and full stability control.
Traction
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
• Track
Suspension
Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to provide the
firmest possible suspension stiffness with the highest
amount of comfort trade-off.
• Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide a
firmer suspension stiffness with moderate comfort tradeoff.
• Street
Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide a
balance of suspension stiffness and ride comfort for typical
daily driving.
Suspension
4
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Steering — If Equipped With 6.4L Engine
• Street
Press the “Comfort⬙ button on the touchscreen to adjust the
steering effort to the lowest level.
RACE OPTIONS
Steering
• Track
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to adjust the
steering effort to the highest level.
• Sport
Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to adjust the
steering effort to the higher level.
Race Options
Press the “Race Options” button on the touchscreen while
in the Drive Modes screen, to display the vehicle’s Launch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
Control screen. Within Race Options, you can activate,
deactivate, and adjust the RPM values for the Launch
Control and Shift Light features.
Launch Control
WARNING!
Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be used
in a controlled environment, and within the limits of
the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by
the performance pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
4
Activate Launch Control
Launch Control can be accessed by pushing the Launch
Control button on the instrument panel switch bank or
pushing the SRT button on the instrument panel switch
bank then selecting the “Race Options” button on the
touchscreen. Press the “Activate Launch Control” button
on the touchscreen to activate the feature. Use the “Launch
RPM Set-Up” vertical bar to set the holding RPM. Launch
Mode can be turned on or off by either pushing the Launch
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control button on the instrument panel switch bank (if
activated), or by pressing the “Cancel Launch Mode”
button on the touchscreen.
launch RPM limits will vary between the automatic transmissions (1500–3500 RPM) and manual transmissions
(2500–4500 RPM).
NOTE: Launch RPM Set-Up cannot be accessed unless
Launch Mode is deactivated.
Shift Light
Shift Light
Launch RPM Set-Up — Manual Transmission
To adjust the Launch RPM, drag the slider bar or press the
arrows on the touchscreen to adjust the holding RPM. The
Your vehicle is equipped with a shift light feature that
illuminates the instrument cluster display (in red). This
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
feature is a visual cue to manually up-shift using the
paddle shifters or the transmission gear selector in manual
shift mode.
To actuate the Shift Light feature, press the “Shift Light”
button on the touchscreen, then press the “Shift Light On”
button on the touchscreen. Activation is shown on the
instrument cluster display. Pressing the “Shift Light RPM
Set-Up” button on the touchscreen will take you to the
Shift Light RPM Set-Up screen.
4
NOTE: For automatic transmissions you must be in
Manual Shift Mode using the transmission gear selector in
order to activate the shift light.
Shift Light RPM Set-Up
The Shift Light RPM Set-Up allows you to set the shift light
to actuate for gears 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5-8 (automatic transmission) 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5-6 (manual transmission). Pressing and
releasing the up/down arrow buttons on the touchscreen
above and below each listed gear, the RPM values will
change in increments of 250 RPM. Pressing and holding the
arrows will change the RPM values in increments of 500
RPM, ranging from 2000–6000 RPM (6.2L) and 2000–6250
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RPM (6.4L). The Shift Light setup screen may only be
accessed if the feature is enabled, press the “Reset to
factory default” button on the touchscreen to change back
to factory settings, or press the “Shift Light Off” button on
the touchscreen to turn the system off completely.
VALET MODE
To enter Valet Mode, press the “Valet” button on the
touchscreen and a popup screen will ask you if you would
like to enter Valet Mode. After selecting “Yes”, you will be
asked to enter a four digit PIN code. The PIN code is not
set, so you are free to select any four digit numeric
combination that will be easy to remember.
While in Valet Mode, the following vehicle configurations
are set and locked to prevent unauthorized modification:
• Engine limited to the lowest power output state.
• On automatic transmission, transmission locks out access to first gear and up-shifts earlier than normal.
• Traction, steering, and suspension are set to their
STREET settings.
• Steering wheel paddle shifters are disabled.
• The Drive Mode interface is not available. Pressing the
SRT button on the touchscreen will display the unlock
keypad.
• The ESC Off button is disabled.
• The Launch Control button is disabled.
Valet Mode Activation
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
4
Valet Mode Deactivation
Valet Mode Deactivation PIN
To exit Valet Mode, you must enter the same four digit PIN
that was used to enter the mode. The unlock keypad can be
accessed by either pushing the SRT button on the faceplate,
or pressing the “Valet Mode Active – Press Here to Exit”
button on the touchscreen.
The Valet Mode Deactivation key pad will then prompt
you for your four digit PIN code. Enter your PIN code, and
press the “OK” button on the touchscreen. Your vehicle
will return to the default state whenever exiting Valet
Mode.
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If your four digit PIN is lost or forgotten, the
vehicle will exit Valet Mode after a battery disconnect for
approximately five minutes. Reconnect the battery and
cycle the ignition to the RUN position; the vehicle will be in
Default Mode.
ECO MODE — IF EQUIPPED WITH AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Press the “Eco” button on the touchscreen on the SRT Drive
Modes main menu. Eco mode modifies the vehicle’s engine
and transmission settings to provide improved fuel
economy at a trade-off with acceleration performance.
Increased engine exhaust noise and/or vibration may be
noticed while Eco is active. This is normal and a result of
the increased amount of operating conditions where the
vehicle is allowed to operate in four cylinder shutoff mode
(6.4L Only).
The Paddle Shifters will be disabled while in Eco mode.
• Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate Eco.
• Eco will be disabled when another Drive Mode is
selected or “ECO” button is pressed.
ECO Mode
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and
iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully
support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
Located in the front storage area of the center console, this
feature allows an iPod/MP3 player, or an external USB
device, to be connected to the audio system.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV USB/AUX Ports
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB Port
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/AUX etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the selected media (AUX, Bluetooth, SD Card). Pushing
the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of
the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track
if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Under certain conditions, an “on” mobile device in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it
is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or
off during mobile device operation when not using
Uconnect (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 inches (20 centimeters) or further from
the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
CLIMATE CONTROLS
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, airflow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for
help.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Automatic Climate Control Overview
4
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Automatic Climate Controls
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
NOTE: Icons and descriptions can vary based upon vehicle
equipment.
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
Icon
Description
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
When toggling the Front Mode Defrost button, the climate system will return to the previous
setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button
on the faceplate, or touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate, or touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Panel Mode
Description
SYNC Button
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The Sync indicator is
illuminated when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while
in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Icon
Bi-Level Mode
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
Description
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of
the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity,
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button.
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button
is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in
Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is
selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and
then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature
is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable feature. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in this section of the
manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode
must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
glass.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Refer
to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance Procedure” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air
with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost on
the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the
front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode
without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When
this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
filtered out. Refer to “Maintenances Procedure” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
Control Settings Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions Chart
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
1. Press the “Apps
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
” button to open the App screen.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the
main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut.
NOTE: This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Main Menu
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect system.
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the Apps
menus, of your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 8.4
NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 8.4 system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is located in the headliner and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions. For
8.4/8.4 NAV Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
3 — Push To End Call
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the top of the
touchscreen.
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
and say
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
“Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command
must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
4
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Media
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
following commandsѧ
. After the beep, say one of the
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
button
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone
Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
Navigation (8.4 NAV)
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the
Uconnect 8.4 system.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
beep, say:
. After the
• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Climate
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
. After
SiriusXM Guardian (8.4 NAV) — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call
and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compatible with your device.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next
section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Navigation
NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
Send & Go
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
Vehicle Finder
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate services in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate
on the web.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
For further information, please visit siriusxm.com/
guardian.
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (8.4 NAV)
Vehicle Health Alert**
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report, which
summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems
so you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance
needs. Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle Health
Alerts when it detects issues with its key systems that need
your attention. For further information go to the Owner
Site website (owners.dodge.com, owners.chrysler.com, or
owners.jeep.com).
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (8.4 NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your
vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mobile App (8.4 NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your car.
• Press the Remote button on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely.
• Press the Location button on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app to bring up a map to locate your
vehicle or send a location to your vehicle’s navigation
system.
• Press the Settings button in the upper left corner of the
app to bring up app settings and access the Assist Call
Centers.
NOTE:
For
further
DriveUconnect.com.
information
please
visit
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4 NAV)
Mobile App
To use the SiriusXM Guardian App:
• Download the SiriusXM Guardian App to your mobile
device.
• Press the Info button on the navigation bar at the bottom
of the app for Vehicle Info.
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. (Not
available for 8.4 system or vehicles sold in the Canadian
market.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button within Apple
CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
SiriusXM Travel Link
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Android Auto — If Equipped
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your
vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your Android powered smartphone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factoryprovided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon
within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Apple CarPlay
• Maps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Android Auto
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Additional Information
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support, call:
1-844-796-4827
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
▫ Downshifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .301
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED .310
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . .301
▫ Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .311
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .311
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C) .304
䡵 AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or
Console Mounted Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ After Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .305
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . .306
▫ Six-Speed Manual Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ 1–4 Skip Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
䡵 DRIVE MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
▫ Launch Mode — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Guidelines For Track Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Acceleration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Traction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
5
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
䡵 POWER STEERING — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
䡵 POWER STEERING — 6.4L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . .333
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED. . .333
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .334
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .334
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . .336
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). . . . . .337
▫ Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ Rain Brake Support (RBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . .352
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ All Season Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped . .360
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ 6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . .364
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles. . . . . . . . .373
▫ Tire Rotation — Same Tire Size On Front And
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . . .373
▫ Tire Rotation — Different Tire Size On Front And
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .366
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
5
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . . .378
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . . .378
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
▫ Rear-Wheel Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in NEUTRAL
and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle. This vehicle
is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will
not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above idle
speed.
(Continued)
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Tip Start Feature
Cycle the ignition switch to START position and release it.
The starter motor will continue to run, and will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running. If the
engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, cycle the ignition switch
to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
This feature allows the driver to operate
the ignition switch with the push of a
button, as long as the ENGINE START/
STOP button is installed and the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in
the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button —
Automatic Transmission Only
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button — Manual
Transmission Only
1. Press and hold the clutch pedal while pushing and
holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Release the button when the engine starts. If the vehicle
fails to start within 15 seconds, release the button, wait
10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
3. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, release the button.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
pushes in a row and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition
switch position will remain in the ACC position until the
vehicle is stopped, placed in PARK and the button is
pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear selector is
not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pushed once, the instrument cluster will display a
“VEHICLE NOT IN PARK” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Automatic Transmission
Only
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Manual Transmission Only
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
1. With the vehicle stopped, place the gear selector in
NEUTRAL, then push and release the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. Place the gear selector in first gear or REVERSE and then
apply the parking brake.
5
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position.
• If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and the
engine is not running.
• If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short pushes in a row before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the vehicle is stopped, placed in
park and the button is pushed twice to the OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions — With Driver’s Foot
OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC and RUN.
To change the ignition switch positions without starting the
vehicle and use the accessories, follow these steps starting
with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change
the ignition switch to the ACC position,
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position,
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
WARNING! (Continued)
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) — Automatic Transmission
Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures,
it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press and hold
the brake pedal, press the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and hold it, then push and release the ENGINE
START/STOP button once. The starter motor will engage
automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage.
Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the
brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) — Manual Transmission Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures,
it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press and hold
the clutch pedal, press the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and hold it, then push and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button for no more than 15 seconds. Release
the accelerator pedal and the clutch pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
5
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that is
located near the air box.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Six-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the parking brake fully
applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
CAUTION!
• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System/Hill Start Assist” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in
damage to the clutch and transmission.
• Do not rest your hand on the gear selector while
driving, as this may result in transmission synchronizer damage.
• Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Damage
to the transmission may occur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms
up. This is normal.
Manual Shifter
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop,
you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE with
the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN position for
Keyless Enter-N-Go) as compared to the LOCK position
(OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go). This is normal
operation of the transmission reverse inhibitor system.
• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
you may hear your transmission. This can be most
noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with
the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may
also be heard when driving at low engine RPM. Also,
this may be more noticeable when the transmission is
warm. This is a normal condition and is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission.
5
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the
clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage to
the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not fully
press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator pedal
when shifting.
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that
centers the gear selector near third and fourth gear. This
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you are
shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second or
downshifting from sixth to fifth.
The spring will try to pull the gear selector toward third
and fourth gear. Make sure you move the gear selector into
second or fifth gear. If you let the gear selector move in the
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first to
fourth or from sixth to third gear.
CAUTION!
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete stop
before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so may
result in transmission damage.
You must always use first gear (or REVERSE) when
starting from a standing position.
Shift Pattern
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
Recommended Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recommended
shift speed chart.
Engine
6.2L Supercharged
6.4L
MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS
1-4
4-5
mph
20
25
(km/h)
(32)
(40)
mph
20
37
(km/h)
(32)
(59)
Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively steady
speeds) may result in increased fuel economy.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
1–4 Skip Shift
In Default or Street Drive Modes, there are times when you
must shift the transmission directly from first gear to
fourth gear instead of from first gear to second gear. This is
to help you get the best possible fuel economy from your
vehicle. This occurs when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is
higher than 106°F (41°C), vehicle speed is greater than
5-6
42
(67)
48
(77)
19 mph (30 km/h) but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the
transmission is in first gear, and the accelerator is at ¼
throttle or less.
NOTE: The 1 - 4 Skip Shift feature is disabled when
selecting Track, Sport, or Custom Drive Modes. Refer to
“SRT Drive Modes” in the “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” section for further descriptions of these
modes.
After you shift the transmission to fourth gear, you can
press the clutch in and shift to another forward gear.
5
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
Downshifting
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, downshift
to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep grade.
WARNING!
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
could have a collision.
CAUTION!
• If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high an engine speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
• Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle is
moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you could
damage the engine and/or clutch.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the
OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF mode.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in
PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the
brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
on the gear selector and in the instrument cluster.
5
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
To select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running
and the brake pedal must be pressed. You must also press the
brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds
(refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this
section). Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
Automatic Transmission Shifter
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are selfcalibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (Autostick) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the Autostick shift control
(refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+)
while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the
DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL (AutoStick)
mode, the transmission gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the gear selector to the
right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
Gear Ranges
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
• Turn the ignition OFF.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
(Continued)
5
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
• With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
5
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head winds), use the
AutoStick shift control (refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this section
for further information) to select a lower gear. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending
on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position) enables full manual control of transmission shifting
(also known as AutoStick mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this
section for further information). Toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the engine
may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may
be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps.
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns
OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
This system can also provide you with more control during
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
driving, and many other situations.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
5
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Paddle Shifters
AUTOSTICK
1 — (–) Shift Paddle
2 — (+) Shift Paddle
Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or
Console Mounted Shifter
Operation
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
When the gear selector is in the DRIVE (D) position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the eight available gears. To activate AutoStick, move the
gear selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the
DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will be
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
displayed in the instrument cluster, along with a highlighted ⬙M⬙ (Manual) indication. When the gear selector is
in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the gear selector forward (-) (or tap the (-) shift paddle on the steering wheel)
to downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, or tap
the lever rearward (+) (or tap the (+) shift paddle), to
command an upshift.
NOTE:
• Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift
paddles (+/-), while the gear selector is in DRIVE, will
activate a temporary AutoStick mode. Tapping (-) to
enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to
the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick
mode will retain the current gear. The current gear will
be displayed in the instrument cluster, but the ⬙M⬙ will
not be highlighted. The transmission will revert back to
normal operation (if the gear selector remains in DRIVE)
after a period of time, depending on accelerator pedal
activity.
• The shift paddles may be disabled (or re-enabled, as
desired) using the Uconnect Personal Settings, or the
SRT Drive Modes.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver (using the
gear selector, or the shift paddles), unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in
the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is
chosen, except as described below.
• In temporary AutoStick mode (gear selector in DRIVE),
the transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached. Lack of accelerator pedal
activity will cause the transmission to revert to automatic operation.
• If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (gear selector in
MANUAL position), manual gear selection will be maintained until the gear selector is returned to DRIVE, or as
described below. The transmission will not upshift automatically at redline in this mode, nor will downshifts
be obtained if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the
floor.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second gear.
Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle
(if the gear selector is already in DRIVE) until “D” is once
again indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift in or
out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
WARNING!
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed, or holding the gear
selector in the (-) position, will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed.
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is engaged.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
5
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE MODES
Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a SRT Drive Mode
feature. This feature gives the driver control over the
systems in the vehicle which affect its performance, enabling the driver to tune it for desired driving scenarios.
Below are the modes of operation:
NOTE: Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further descriptions of these
modes.
Drive Modes
• TRACK MODE — This mode is a predefined configuration optimized for typical track driving. The Traction,
Transmission, Steering, and Suspension systems are all
set to their TRACK settings. Steering wheel mounted
paddle shifters are enabled.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
• SPORT MODE — This mode is a predefined configuration optimized for typical enthusiast driving. The Traction, Transmission, Steering, and Suspension systems
are all set to their SPORT settings. Steering wheel
mounted paddle shifters are enabled.
• CUSTOM MODE — This mode allows the driver to
create a custom vehicle configuration that is saved for
quick selection of favorite settings. The system will
return to Default mode when the ignition switch is
cycled from RUN to OFF to RUN, if this mode is
selected. While in Custom Mode the Traction, Transmission, Steering, Suspension and Paddle shifter settings
may be configured through the custom mode set-up in
any combination.
5
Custom Mode Set-Up
NOTE: If equipped with a manual transmission, the 1 - 4
Skip Shift Feature is disabled in TRACK, SPORT, and
CUSTOM Drive Modes.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
Listed below is a description of each of these settings:
Transmission (Trans)
• Track — provides the fastest shift speeds and has the
highest comfort trade-off.
• Sport — provides a faster shift speed and has a moderate
comfort trade-off.
• Street — provides a balance of shift speed and comfort
for typical daily driving.
Paddles
• On — enables steering wheel mounted paddle shifters.
• Street — provides full traction control and full stability
control.
Suspension (Susp)
• Track — provides the firmest possible suspension stiffness with the highest amount of comfort trade-off.
• Sport — provides a firmer suspension stiffness with
moderate comfort trade-off.
• Street — provides a balance of suspension stiffness and
ride comfort for typical daily driving.
Steering — 6.4L Engine Only
• Off — disables steering wheel mounted paddle shifters.
• Track — provides the greatest amount of steering feedback, requiring the highest amount of steering effort.
NOTE: Paddle shifters will enable whenever the gear
selector is in the M (Manual) position, regardless of drive
mode configuration.
• Sport — provides greater steering feedback, requiring
greater steering effort.
Traction
• Track — modifies traction control to optimize track
performance with the least stability control.
• Sport — turns off traction control and reduces stability
control.
• Street — provides a balance of steering feedback and
steering effort.
Engine Power — 6.2L Supercharged Engine Only
• 700+ HP — Provides engine output power to 700+
horsepower.
NOTE: This selection is only available with the RED key
fob “700+ HP”.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
• This selection is available with the RED or BLACK key
fob “500 HP”.
• Transmission locks out access to first gear and shifts
earlier than normal.
NOTE: 500 HP — Provides engine output power to 500
horsepower.
• Traction, Steering and Suspension are forced to STREET
settings.
• DEFAULT MODE — This mode will be activated automatically when restarting the vehicle unless Valet Mode
is active. This mode is for typical driving conditions
where the Traction and Transmission will be operating
in their STREET settings, which cannot be changed
while in this mode. The Steering (electric power steering
— if equipped) assist and Suspension (active dampening
system) stiffness may be configured to either the
STREET, SPORT or TRACK settings within this mode.
Steering wheel mounted paddle shifters may be enabled
or disabled while in this mode as well.
• VALET MODE — To enter this mode the operator must
select it from the Drive Modes interface and enter a four
digit PIN code. The PIN code is not predetermined, so
the operator is free to select any four digit numeric
combination that will be easy to remember. While in
Valet Mode, the following vehicle configurations are set
and locked to prevent unauthorized modification:
• Engine limited to a lowest power output state.
• Steering wheel mounted paddle shifters are disabled.
• The SRT Drive Modes are not available. Pushing the SRT
button will display the unlock keypad.
• The ESC Off button is disabled.
• The Launch Control button is disabled.
NOTE:
• To exit VALET Mode, the operator must enter the same
four digit PIN that was used to enter the mode. The
unlock keypad can be accessed by either pushing the
SRT button or selecting to disable Valet on the Uconnect
touchscreen.
• The vehicle will restart with VALET active if VALET was
active when the vehicle was last shut down.
• Eco (Automatic Transmission only) — Eco modifies the
vehicle’s engine and transmission settings to provide
improved fuel economy at a trade-off with acceleration
5
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
performance. Increased engine exhaust noise and/or
vibration may be noticed while Eco is active, this is
normal and will not damage the vehicle.
NOTE: Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate Eco.
Launch Mode — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Mode system that
is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum
vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Mode is a
form of traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where consistent
quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The system
is not intended to compensate for lack of driver experience
or familiarity with the race track. Use of this feature in low
traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions may result in
excess wheel slip outside of this system’s control, resulting
in an aborted launch.
NOTE: Launch mode is not available within the first 500
miles of engine break-in.
Preconditions:
• Launch Mode should not be used on public roads. Always
check track conditions and the surrounding area.
• Launch mode is not available within the first 500 miles
of engine break-in.
• Launch Mode should only be used when the engine and
transmission are at operating temperature.
• Launch Mode is intended to be used on dry, paved road
surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces may
cause damage to vehicle components and is not recommended.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Launch Mode is only available when the following procedure is followed:
1. Push the LAUNCH button on the center stack switch
bank.
NOTE: Pushing the SRT button on the center stack or
pressing the “Apps” button on the touchscreen are two
other options to access launch mode features. Please refer
to “SRT Drive Modes” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
2. Slide the RPM slider bar on the touchscreen. This screen
will allow you to adjust your launch RPM’s for optimum launch/traction.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
3. Press the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the touchscreen.
4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight.
6. Hold the brake and make sure the vehicle is in “DRIVE”.
7. While holding the brake, rapidly apply the accelerator
pedal to wide open throttle. The engine speed will hold
at the RPM that was set in the “Launch RPM Set-up”
screen.
NOTE: Messages will appear in the instrument cluster to
inform the driver if one or more of the above conditions
have not been met.
8. When conditions four through seven have been met, the
instrument cluster display will read “Launch Ready
Release Brake”.
9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
Launch mode will be active until the vehicle reaches
62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the ESC system will
return to its current ESC mode.
Launch mode will abort before launch completion, display
“Launch Aborted” in the cluster under any the following
conditions:
• The accelerator pedal is released during launch.
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
moving in a straight line.
• The “ESC OFF” button is pushed to change the system
to another mode.
NOTE: After launch mode has been aborted, ESC will
return to its current ESC mode.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Vehicles with a manual transmission have an adjustable
launch RPM controlled through the Uconnect system.
Launch Mode is only available when the following procedure is followed:
1. Push the LAUNCH button on the center stack switch
bank.
NOTE: Pushing the SRT button on the center stack or
pressing the “Apps” button on the touchscreen are two
other options to access launch mode features. Please refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
5
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Slide the RPM slider bar on the touchscreen. This screen
will allow you to adjust your launch RPM’s for optimum launch/traction.
wide open throttle to launch execute shifts. Refer to
“Manual Transmission – If Equipped” in this section for
further information.
3. Press the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the touchscreen.
Release the clutch and continue to hold wide open throttle
to launch.
4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight.
Launch mode will be active until the vehicle reaches
62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the ESC system will
return to its current ESC mode.
6. Fully depress the clutch pedal and make sure the vehicle
is in first gear.
7. While holding the clutch depressed, rapidly apply the
accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The engine
speed will hold at the pre-selected launch RPM. The
engine speed will hold at the RPM that was set in the
“Launch RPM Set-up” screen.
NOTE: Messages will appear in the instrument cluster to
inform the driver if one or more of the above conditions
have not been met.
8. When conditions 4 through 7 have been met, the instrument cluster display will read “Launch Ready Release
Clutch”. Release the clutch quickly and continue to hold
Launch mode will abort before launch completion, display
“Launch Aborted” in the cluster and return to ESC Full ON
under any the following conditions:
• The brake is applied during launch.
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
moving in a straight line.
• The “ESC OFF” button is pushed to change the ESC
system to another mode.
NOTE: After launch mode has been aborted, ESC will
return to its current ESC mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are
spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the
transmission may occur.
Guidelines For Track Use
NOTE: Because of the extreme conditions encountered
during track use, any damage or wear associated with
track use may not be covered by warranty.
• If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes, they
will alter the vehicle’s performance in various driving
situations. It is recommended that your vehicle operates
in SPORT or TRACK modes during the track event.
• Prior to each track event/day, verify all fluids are at the
correct levels. Refer to “Fluid Capacities” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
• Prior to each track event, verify the front and rear brake
pads have more than ½ pad thickness remaining. If the
brake pads require changing, please burnish prior to
track outing at full pace.
NOTE: Use of DOT 4 brake fluid is suggested for extended
track usage due to increased thermal capacity.
• At the conclusion of each track event, it is recommended
that a brake bleed procedure is performed to maintain
the pedal feel and stopping capability of your Brembo
High Performance brake system.
• It is recommended that each track outing should end
with a minimum of one cool down lap using minimal
braking.
• If equipped with a removable lower front fascia grille, it
is recommended to remove it for track use during
warm/hot weather to improve cooling airflow to critical
powertrain and cooling system components.
• All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of endurance. However, it is recommended that suspension
system, brake system, prop shaft, and ½ shaft boots
should be checked for wear or damage after every track
event.
• Track usage results in increased operating temperatures
of the engine, transmission, clutch – if equipped, driveline and brake system. This may affect noise (NVH)
5
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
countermeasures designed into your vehicle. New components may need to be installed to return the system to
the original NVH performance.
two lap cool down with minimal brake applies. Make
sure the brakes are not smoking. If they are, do another
cool down lap.
• Tire pressure:
• 40psi (276kpa) hot, recommend 32psi (221kpa) front,
30psi (207 kpa) rear cold
3. Do not continue for more than 1 full burnishing lap after
you start smelling the brakes. Do not get them smoking
heavily. This will get them too hot and affect their life
negatively in future track use.
NOTE: It is recommended that you target 40psi (276kpa)
Hot Tire Pressure at the conclusion of each track session.
Starting at 32psi (221kpa) Front & 30psi (207 kpa) Rear
Cold and adjusting based on ambient & track conditions is
recommended. Tire pressure can be monitored via the
instrument cluster display and can assist with adjustments.
4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool in the paddock for at least
30 min. If an infrared thermal gun is available, allow
rotors to cool to 200°F (93.3°C) before going back out.
Track burnishing your brakes:
5. There should be a thin ash layer when inspecting the
pads installed in the caliper. Having the ash layer go
more than half the thickness of the pad material indicates too aggressive of a burnish.
To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, the brake
pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for factory
installed components or when new brake friction components are installed:
6. Sometimes, a second burnish session is required. If the
pads start smelling in the next track session, reduce
speed and braking decel to burnish targets and follow
steps 2-4.
1. Use one track session to burnish brakes by driving at
75% speed. Brake at approximately 0.60-0.80g max without ABS intervention.
7. New pads installed on old rotors still need to be
burnished. New rotors installed with old pads should be
burnished at the track or street driven for 300 city miles
to develop an adequate lining transfer layer on the rotor
surface prior to track use.
2. Lap the track in this manner until you start smelling the
brakes. Continue for another ½ lap at speed, then do a
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should be replaced.
Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended, as it
removes mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal
capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor cheek, making
it less robust and increasing the likelihood of pulsation
in further track use.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions
should be observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the
amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved
handling.
5
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING! (Continued)
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Due to lower ground clearance, driving your vehicle
up steep driveways, approach ramps or near parking
blocks may cause damage to the front fascia and
ground effects.
• Driving through snow more than 4 inches (100 mm)
deep may cause damage to the front fascia and
ground effects.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
(Continued)
POWER STEERING — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED
ENGINE
The hydraulic power steering system is sport tuned and
will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide
mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
5
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Power Steering Fluid Check
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service
interval is not required. The fluid should be checked at
every oil change if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized
dealer.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This
is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in
any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power
steering fluid.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
POWER STEERING — 6.4L ENGINE
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it
from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer
the vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Drive Modes” in
this section for further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
POWER STEERING” or the “POWER STEERING
ASSIST OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM” message is
displayed within the instrument cluster, this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load and
cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
5
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position.
When the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch
is in the ON position (RUN position with Keyless EnterN-Go), the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster
will illuminate.
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission
is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting
to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
Manual Transmission Parking Brake Release
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time
and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Automatic Transmission Parking Brake
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position of an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOFFⴖ mode. Remove
the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
When the keyless ignition is in the “OFF” mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
(Continued)
5
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the automatic transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. There
will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may
be evident by increased pedal travel during application,
greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high performance
braking system. The brake pads are a semi-metallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance for consistent
operation. A compromise to using this type of brake pad is
that the brakes may produce more brake dust and may
squeal slightly under certain weather and operating conditions (i.e., during light brake applications). This is considered normal conditions.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), and Rain Brake Support (RBS).
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused
(Continued)
5
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, have the light repaired as soon
as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
5
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. Also,
be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the instrument cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within twenty
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
Traction Control System (TCS)
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
5
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes — SRT
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
NOTE:
• For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple
momentary button pushed may be required to return to
ESC On.
• ⬙Traction Sport⬙ and ⬙Traction Track⬙ (if equipped) are
ESC partial off mode(s). Upon the first push of the ESC
button the system goes into SPORT mode, indication
comes on in the cluster (a picture of the vehicle with the
word SPORT), and the light in the cluster is illuminated.
The second push of the ESC button the system will go
into TRACK mode, indication comes on in the cluster (a
picture of the vehicle with the word TRACK), and the
light in the cluster remains illuminated. When it is
pushed a third time the ESC will go back into ESC On,
no indication, and the illumination in the cluster turns
off.
5
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
ON again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to Partial
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed. When
the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined speed the
system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes – if
equipped.
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or
off-road use.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC
OFF Indicator Light
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
5
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
WARNING! (Continued)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
(Continued)
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach
full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in
wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are
in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active,
there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
WARNING!
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
WARNING! (Continued)
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result
in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating”,
or the Tire Information Supplement, located in your Owner’s Information kit.
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in
“Starting And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supplement located in your Owner’s Information kit, for further
information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING! (Continued)
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
5
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Economy
CAUTION! (Continued)
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
judgement when determining proper
may look properly inflated even when
inflated.
a good quality
make a visual
inflation. Tires
they are under-
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
(Continued)
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
5
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
All Season Tires — If Equipped
WARNING!
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure
adversely affect the safety and handling of
designation or
sidewall. Use
to do so may
your vehicle.
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
5
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
WARNING! (Continued)
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
WARNING!
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicator” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance
schedule is highly recommended.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
(Continued)
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices are
not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
Tire Rotation — Same Tire Size On Front And Rear
Axle
The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped with
all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in the
following diagram.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Remember, more frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything causing
rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation.
Tire Rotation
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
Tire Rotation — Different Tire Size On Front And
Rear Axle
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The suggested rotation method is the “side-to-side” as
shown in the following diagram. This method is required
due to different size tires on the front and rear of the
vehicle.
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
Tire Rotation
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale
Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and
the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30
psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPM Telltale Light
will still be ON. In this situation, the TPM Telltale Light
will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
(Continued)
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance or sensor damage.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to
assure proper TPM feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
Premium System
• Four TPM sensors.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the instrument cluster.
• TPM Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure
is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a “Inflate to XXX” message
and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the
low tire pressure values shown in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition (those
shown in a different color in the instrument cluster graphic)
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the “Inflate to XXX” message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the graphic display in the instrument
cluster will return the pressure values shown to their original
color, and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which
sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer flash,
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer
display, and a pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “TPM
Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will sound.
In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will
still display the low pressure values in a different color
and an “Inflate to XXX” message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument
cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in
the instrument cluster will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when
installing Winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped
with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive
the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition switch
cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or flash the TPM
telltale and display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
in the instrument cluster display but dashes (--) will remain
in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn
off, and the instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message. The instrument cluster will also
display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition switch cycle the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations, provide optimal
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “Premium” gasoline having a posted octane
number of 91 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane “Premium” gasoline is required in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause
the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent
gasoline
is
recommended.
Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
CAUTION!
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left
side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door. If the
gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is
for use with this vehicle.
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities
into the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
Fuel Fill Cap
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
NOTE:
VEHICLE LOADING
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on
if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the
gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the
“Vehicle Certification Label”. This information should be
used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the instrument
cluster. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly
and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the
message. If the problem continues, the message will appear
the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the
drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of vehicle
• Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear
GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if
either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and
rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle
is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it
is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on
the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the
brakes operate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWRs.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME,
ETC.)
Rear-Wheel Drive
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or
using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .383
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . . .385
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .388
䡵 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Preparations For Jump Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . .401
6
382 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch
bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off
the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 383
CAUTION!
Torque Specifications
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F (116°C) or
greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range 200–230°F (93–110°C).
If the pointer remains at 240°F (116°C) or greater and
you hear a chime, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
111 Ft-Lbs (150 N·m)
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
22 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
Wheel Mounting Surface
6
384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Description
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 385
Tire Service Kit Storage
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
6
Tire Service Kit Components
Tire Service Kit Location
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on the
bottom side of the Tire Service
Kit)
386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing A
Tire With Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle
And Hose Replacement”.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the Black
Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when
selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn
on the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button
(4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire
application use and need to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on
the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your tire.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
• If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
• If the tire has any sidewall damage.
• If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
• If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
• If the wheel has any damage.
• If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
sources.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
(Continued)
6
388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in
Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in the
OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve
stem.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning on the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not
Air Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the engine is running before turning on the
Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump
Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
6
390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument
panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting
your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can
also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause permanent damage
to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
To Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw
the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6
392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement”.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage
area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle
(1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it
accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that
the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front
of the housing. Push the bottle into the housing. An
audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked
into place.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump starting.
6
Remote Battery Posts Locations
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
(Continued)
394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
Jump Starting Procedure
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
1. Set the parking brake, shift into PARK (automatic transmission) or FIRST GEAR (manual transmission) and
cycle the ignition to OFF.
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6
CAUTION!
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then shift
396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or FIRST GEAR and REVERSE (with
manual transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts
between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at
wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE
or REVERSE.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information. Once
the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again
to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE / FIRST GEAR and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual
Park Release lever.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION
6
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured
vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those
in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a
Manual Park Release is available.
Console Storage Bin
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the tether
strap up through the opening in the console base.
398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing it
to the right.
5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
rearward until it locks in place in the vertical position.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Locking Tab
Tether Strap
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down, to its original position, until the locking tab snaps
into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The Ground
Flat Tow
NONE
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
Rear
ALL
Flatbed
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION/
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED
BEST METHOD
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
6
400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may occur from improper towing.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
Automatic Transmission
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to
⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions on
shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the engine
is off.
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30
miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of towing
is with a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out
of PARK for towing.
Manual Transmission
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, then the only acceptable
method of towing is with a flatbed truck.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT —
6.2L SUPERCHARGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L . . . . . . . . . . .406
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .407
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual Transmission) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .427
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . .427
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
7
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .436
▫ Center Tail/Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . .440
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . .449
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Fluid Capacities — SRT 6.2L . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp — Models With Halogen
Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Fluid Capacities — SRT 6.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, And
Park/Turn Lamp — Models With High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped . . . .448
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Intercooler Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
9 — Air Cleaner Filter
10 — Power Steering Reservoir
11 — Engine Oil Dipstick
12 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
Engine Oil Fill
6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
8 — Air Cleaner Filter
9 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Engine Oil Dipstick
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
7
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the instrument
cluster. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly
and press the Trip Odometer button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, or recently had a dead battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON mode, but do not crank or
start the engine.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition to the ON mode, you
will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you cycle the ignition
OFF or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
CAUTION! (Continued)
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform
repairs and service when necessary could result in
more costly repairs, damage to other components or
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately
have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a
(Continued)
flush is needed because of component malfunction,
use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as once a month. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the
oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 quart (.95 liters)
of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE”
range will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE”
range on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra
0W-40 engine or equivalent Mopar oil meeting the FCA
Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity
Use Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 engine or equivalent Mopar oil
meeting the FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all
operating temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
7
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Engine Oil Change Requirements — 6.2L
Supercharged Engine (If Equipped)
We recommend having your oil changed and vehicle
serviced by your authorized dealer. You should only perform maintenance procedures and/or repairs for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
Your 6.2L Supercharged engine (if equipped) has a unique
engine oil system. The system contains a drain in the
engine oil pan and the engine oil cooler. It is necessary for
the service technician to drain both the engine oil pan and
the engine oil cooler to properly perform the engine oil
change procedure. Failure to drain the engine oil cooler
will result in overfilling your vehicle’s engine oil system.
NOTE: Do not overfill crankcase with engine oil, pressure
loss or oil foaming can result.
To access these oil drains, the vehicle needs to be safely
lifted and supported to remove the front underbody
shields (belly pan). Your service technician will refer to the
Service Manual for proper under body shield (belly pan)
removal and installation procedures.
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
Engine Oil Filter
WARNING! (Continued)
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter.
Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are
recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
(Continued)
near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
7
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the
trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine
compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
Battery Location
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book for further warranty
information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-saving product. However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side
of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf — If
Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP
(Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Access Door
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
7
A/C Air Filter
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used filter.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle
(text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
5. Close the filter access cover.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades
clean. This will help blade performance.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
7
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when
the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
NOTE: Your vehicle’s exhaust system may be equipped
with an Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system, if the
exhaust system is replaced with aftermarket products a
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or place the ignition in the
LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-NGo). The fan is temperature controlled and can start
at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position
(RUN position for Keyless Enter-N-Go).
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer.
Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle and/or the supercharger
coolant recovery bottle (if equipped with the 6.2L Supercharged engine) tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears,
cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle and
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT
REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
7
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If equipped with the 6.2L Supercharged engine the
intercooler must be vacuum flushed and filled. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact
your local authorized dealer.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug
the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer
for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact your local
authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
7
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System Pressure Caps
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant
in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
NOTE: Be sure you do not mix the engine coolant system
pressure cap with the intercooler system pressure cap.
These caps are not interchangeable.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper
level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
7
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if
the “Brake Warning Light” indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX” mark
on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements
described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes,
fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
WARNING! (Continued)
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
In the event of leakage or wear, use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
for further information.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left
side of the transmission. The fluid level should be 1/4 inch
(6.4mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid, if
necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to “Fluids,
Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Change Transmission Fluid
If contaminated with water, change the fluid immediately.
See your authorized dealer for service.
Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual Transmission) —
If Equipped
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated volume
of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
7
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check
your transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission
fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
Fluid And Filter Changes
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Fluid Level Check
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic
locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in
snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and
road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to
the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes
your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on
paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on level
ground and has been stationary for 15 minutes will improve the accuracy of the fluid level reading.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle.
The fluid level should be 1-2.5 mm below the fill plug. Add
fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
What Causes Corrosion?
Change Axle Fluid
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
• Stone and gravel impact.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Rear Axle
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
7
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Special Care
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
(Continued)
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with
a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean or equivalent,
or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose Cleaner
or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
Interior Care
CAUTION!
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or
decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent
damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
7
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth or micro-fiber towel. A mild
soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window
equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed on
the inside of the power distribution center cover.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Front Power Distribution Center
Cavity
1
2
Cartridge Fuse
–
40 Amp Green
Mini-Fuse
–
–
Description
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
Cavity
3
Cartridge Fuse
50 Amp Red
Mini-Fuse
–
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
–
–
–
–
–
–
50 Amp Red
50 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
Description
Electric Power Steering #1 – If Equipped /
Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) – If
Equipped
Starter
Anti Lock Brake
Anti Lock Brake
Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
Intrusion MOD (300) – If Equipped / Under Hood Lamp – Police
Horns
Air Conditioning Clutch
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Left HID – If Equipped
Right HID – If Equipped
Radiator Fan – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
Electric Power Steering #2 – If Equipped /
Radiator Fan #2 (6.2L Supercharged)
7
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
20
21
23
24
28
29
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
40 Amp Green /
20 Amp Blue – Police
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
–
–
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Clear
–
–
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
22
Mini-Fuse
–
–
Description
Wiper Motor
Headlamp Washers – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed #2
–
Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Bat Feed # 3
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
Police Bat Feed # 1
Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3
Fuse – Spare
Transmission Control Module
(Challenger/Charger Police) / Electronic
Shift Module (Challenger)
Fuse – Spare
Engine Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Powertrain #1
Powertrain #2
Anti-Lock Brake Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
Cavity
37
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
38
39
–
–
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
48
–
10 Amp Red
49
50
51
52
53
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
–
Description
Engine Controller / Rad Fan Relays
(Charger/300) / Electric Power Steering
Module (Charger/300) / 5-Speed TCM
Airbag Module
EPS (Challenger) / EHPS (Police) / AC
Clutch Relay / Vacuum Pump Relay /
Rad Fan Relays (Challenger)
AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect – If
Equipped
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Vacuum Pump
Adaptive Cruise – If Equipped
Fuse – Spare
7
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed on the inside of the power distribution
center cover.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Rear Power Distribution Center
Cavity
2
3
4
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
–
60 Amp Yellow
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
Description
Front PDC Feed #1
Fuse – Spare
Front PDC Feed #2
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
Cavity
5
Mini-Fuse
–
6
7
8
9
10
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
11
30 Amp Pink
–
12
–
20 Amp Yellow
15
16
17
18
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
19
20
21
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Sunroof/Dome Lamp –
Police
Exterior Lighting #1
Exterior Lighting #2
Interior Lighting
Power Locks
Driver Door Control Module
Passenger Door Control
Module
Dual USB Center Console
Rear/Cigar Lighter IP – If
Equipped
HVAC Blower
Left Spot Lamp – Police
Fuse – Spare
Mod Network Interface –
Police
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuel Pump
7
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
22
23
24
25
26
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow – Police
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
27
31
32
33
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Breaker
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
34
–
10 Amp Red
35
36
–
–
5 Amp Tan
15 Amp Blue
37
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Right Spot Lamp – Police
Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port
Integrated Center Stack
Tire Pressure Monitor
Cygnus Transmission
Module (Charger/300) /
Electronic Shift Module
(Charger/300)
Amplifier – If Equipped
Power Seats – If Equipped
HVAC Module/Cluster
Ignition Switch/RF Hub
Module/Steering Column
Lock (300) – If Equipped
Steering Column Module/
Clock (300)
Battery Sensor
Electronic Exhaust Valve –
If Equipped
Radio
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
Cavity
38
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
40
41
42
43
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
44
–
10 Amp Red
45
–
15 Amp Blue
46
47
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
48
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Power Outlet Inside Arm
Rest/Console Media Hub
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Rear Defrost
Comfort Seat And Steering
Wheel Module (Heated
Steering Wheel/RR
Heated Seats)
Park Assist / Blind Spot /
Rear View Camera
Cluster / Rearview Mirror /
Compass (Charger/300) /
Humidity Sensor / Forward
Facing Camera (Lane Departure)
Fuse – Spare
Adaptive Front Lighting /
Day Time Running Lamps
– If Equipped
Active Suspension – (6.4L /
6.2L)
7
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
49
50
51
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
52
–
10 Amp Red
53
–
10 Amp Red
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
–
Description
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Front Heated / Vented
Seats – If Equipped
Heated Cupholders/Rear
Heated Seat Switches – If
Equipped
HVAC Module/In Vehicle
Temperature Sensor
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Airbag Module
Adjustable Pedals – Police
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
Cavity
64
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
25 Amp Breaker
65
66
67
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
–
10 Amp Red
68
–
10 Amp Red
69
70
–
–
–
–
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Description
Rear Windows (Charger/
300)
Airbag Module
Fuse – Spare
Rain and Light Sensor /
Sunroof / Inside RR View
Mirror / Police Run Acc
Relay
Dual USB Power Outlet –
R/A Sense (Charger/300)
Rear Sunshade (Charger/
300) RR USB Timer
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
7
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps
W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp
562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
578
Visor Vanity Lamps
A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped
194
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Halogen Headlamp
Front Park/Turn Lamp
Bulb Number
D3S (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) *
HIR2LL
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
Front Fog Lamp
Front Side Marker
Tail Lamp
Stop/Turn Lamp
Rear Side Marker
Backup Lamp
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
License
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
Bulb Number
H11LL
(Serviced At Authorized
(Serviced At Authorized
(Serviced At Authorized
(Serviced At Authorized
(Serviced At Authorized
(Serviced At Authorized
(Serviced At Authorized
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
* The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of this,
you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp — Models With Halogen
Headlamps — If Equipped
BULB REPLACEMENT
2. Remove the headlamp cover.
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
3. Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly.
To replace the passenger side lamps:
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: The park/turn lamps can also be accessed at this
point.
4. Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to remove.
7
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Remove bulb by turning it counter clockwise and disconnect.
7. Remove bulb by turn it counter clockwise and disconnect.
6. Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect.
8. Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect.
7. Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise
and then reinstall headlamp cover.
9. Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise
and then reinstall headlamp cover.
To replace the driver side lamps:
10. Reinstall engine air cleaner assembly.
1. Open the hood.
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, And
Park/Turn Lamp — Models With High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped
2. Remove the air cleaner filter cover by removing three
fasteners and loosening the clean air inlet clamp and
then rotate cover off to the side.
NOTE: The cover has an electrical connector that does not
need to be disconnected if the cover is rotated off to the
side.
3. Remove one fastener on the lower air box to remove and
access the rear of the headlamp assembly.
4. Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly.
5. Remove the headlamp cover.
6. Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to remove.
HID Headlamps
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of this,
you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when
the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the
lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp
The Tail/Turn and Stop Lamps use LED lamps that are not
serviceable separately. The Tail/Turn and Stop Lamps must
be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Center Tail/Backup Lamp
The Center Tail/Backup Lamp use LED lamps that are not
serviceable separately. The Center Tail/Backup Lamp must
be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
The License Lamp use LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The License Lamp must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
7
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fluid Capacities — SRT 6.2L
Fuel (Approximate)
91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified
Cooling System *
Engine: Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming
to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent
Intercooler: Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled
U.S.
Metric
18.5 Gallons
70 Liters
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
15 Quarts
14.4 Liters
4.5 Quarts
4.2 Liters
to MAX level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
Fluid Capacities — SRT 6.4L
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol
18.5 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified
7 Quarts
Cooling System *
Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
15 Quarts
MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
70 Liters
6.6 Liters
14.4 Liters
7
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Important Information
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
Engine
Component
Engine/Intercooler Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032.
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent
Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol.
7
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
Hydraulic Power Steering Reservoir
– If Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder
Rear Axle
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend you use Mopar Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid or
equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-10838.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3,
SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every 24 months. This interval is time
based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
We recommend you use Mopar LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85
(API GL-5).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
8
456 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
NOTE:
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual
must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect
your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be
needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as
dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and
service should also be done anytime a malfunction is
suspected.
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil
if it has been six months since your last oil change, even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
The message “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever
comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset. Refer to
the steps described under “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 457
At Each Stop For Fuel
At Each Oil Change
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
for further information.
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.
Once A Month
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, and add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
8
458 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
150,000
210,000
144,000
200,000
138,000
190,000
132,000
180,000
126,000
170,000
120,000
160,000
114,000
150,000
108,000
140,000
102,000
130,000
96,000
120,000
90,000
110,000
84,000
100,000
78,000
90,000
72,000
80,000
66,000
70,000
60,000
60,000
54,000
Or Kilometers:
50,000
48,000
12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
40,000
42,000
6
30,000
36,000
12,000
Or Months:
20,000
30,000
6,000
24,000
Miles:
10,000
18,000
Maintenance Chart
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before scheduled maintenance.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
boot seals, for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end
play; replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
If using your vehicle for any of the following:
dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the CV joints.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the exhaust system.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four wheel disc brakes.
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the manual transmission fluid – if
equipped.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the rear axle fluid.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Change the manual transmission fluid – if
equipped.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
150,000
144,000
138,000
132,000
126,000
120,000
114,000
102,000
108,000
X
Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if necessary
X
X
X
250,000
240,000
X
X
X
230,000
220,000
210,000
200,000
190,000
180,000
170,000
96,000
90,000
X
X
X
160,000
150,000
84,000
140,000
72,000
78,000
130,000
120,000
60,000
66,000
110,000
100,000
54,000
90,000
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
48,000
42,000
Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle
for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet or
frequent trailer towing.
80,000
70,000
30,000
36,000
60,000
Or Kilometers:
50,000
12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
20,000
24,000
12,000
6
40,000
6,000
Or Months:
30,000
Miles:
10,000
18,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 459
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace the spark plugs – 6.2L Supercharged
Engine **
X
Replace the spark plugs – 6.4L Engine **
X
8
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120
months if not done at 150,000 miles (240,000 km).
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
(Continued)
X
WARNING! (Continued)
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .465
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center. . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . . . . . . . .463
9
462 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring the
right papers with you, as well as your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history, as this
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 463
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
9
464 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 465
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
9
466 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Canada
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
INDEX
10
468 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334, 336
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . . .124
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Adding Washer Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Adjust
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 102
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 102
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 401
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 75, 181
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter). . . . . .413
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281, 416
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . .280, 282
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415, 416
Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273, 279, 415
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Alarm, Panic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 183, 188, 205
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . .422, 450, 451
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
INDEX 469
Automatic Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . .279
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311, 427, 429
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429, 452, 454
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452, 454
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . . .316
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452, 454
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452, 454
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184, 413
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Brake Control System, Electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452, 454
Brake, Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336, 425
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 452, 454
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182, 336
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446, 447
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 446
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450, 451
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 375
10
470 INDEX
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .408
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . . .67
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . . .63
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .60
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Climate Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Cold Weather Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Console Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450, 451
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421, 424
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .422, 450, 451, 452, 453
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199, 200, 202, 203
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167, 435
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Daytime Running Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
INDEX 471
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399, 400
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Door Ajar Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Door Locks
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 26
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Key Fob Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Drive Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . .436
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .121, 122, 124
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . . .186
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392, 393, 394
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399, 400
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Emission Control System Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .408
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405, 406
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
10
472 INDEX
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421, 452, 453
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 375
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392, 393, 394
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410, 450, 451, 452, 453
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411, 450, 451
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Engine Oil Viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . .56, 401
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Ethanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 375
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 419
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281, 416
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413, 452, 453
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 113, 199
Flash-To-Pass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452, 454
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450, 451
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . .452
INDEX 473
Fog Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Forward Collision Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372, 452, 453
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452, 453
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450, 451
Fueling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink). . . . . . . . . . . .154, 160
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376, 408
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating. . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.372
.313
.434
.378
.378
.378
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Hazard Warning Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . .113
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 117
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Headlight Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Head Restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
10
474 INDEX
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . . .113
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .177, 184, 185, 196, 199
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Instrument Panel And Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
iPod Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392, 393, 394
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . .16, 21
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . .21
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . .21
Key Fob, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Key-In Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 302
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 231
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
INDEX 475
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 446
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 109
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 75, 181
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182, 336
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 154
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199, 200, 202, 203
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 448
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 117
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 154
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .189
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 154
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 154
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446, 447
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . .192, 366
10
476 INDEX
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 113, 199
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .184, 199
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 378
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Low Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Maintenance Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456, 458
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .189, 408
Manual
Backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Manual Park Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Manual, Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306, 427, 429
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427, 429
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 154
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 89
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 465
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
INDEX 477
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . .372, 452, 453
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410, 452, 453
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450, 451
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413, 452, 453
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411, 450, 451
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411, 450, 451
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Oil Filter, Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . .4, 466
Paddle Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Passenger Seat
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211, 240
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . .352, 353
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
10
478 INDEX
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Power Seats
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Power Steering Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452, 454
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14, 23, 25, 32
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Rain Sensitive Wiper System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Rear Cupholder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Reformulated Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . .16, 21
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . . . .269
INDEX 479
Remote Starting
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . . . .233
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Schedule, Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Seat Belt
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 75
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 38, 40
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 99, 101, 103
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 99
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
10
480 INDEX
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 103
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 183
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .452, 453
Selection Of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Sentry Key
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Shift Indicator Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 113, 199
SiriusXM Guardian
Mobile App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452, 453
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452, 453
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452, 453
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123, 124
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . .121, 122, 124
SRT
Console Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Paddle Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
SRT Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 301
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
INDEX 481
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119, 120
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119, 120
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .269
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280, 445
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Sunglasses Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . .48
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119, 120
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . .279
Tilt
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119, 120
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . .352, 353
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 357, 365
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352, 357
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352, 354
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347, 357
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
10
482 INDEX
Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Tire Service Kit . . . . .384, 385, 386, 388, 389, 390, 391, 392
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399, 400
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310, 311, 427
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427, 452, 454
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309, 310
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 35
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 199
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 233
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Voice Recognition
Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
SiriusXM Guardian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354, 377, 378
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . .17
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280, 445
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
INDEX 483
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 117, 418
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Window Fogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 117, 418
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Wiper Blade Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2017 Challenger SRT/Hellcat
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
2017
17D492-126-AD
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Fourth Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
Challenger
SRT/Hellcat
Download PDF